Pontiac Vibe 2006, 2006 Vibe Owner's manual

Pontiac Vibe 2006, 2006 Vibe Owner's manual
2006 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-9
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-26
Airbag System
......................................... 1-49
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-66
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-6
Windows ................................................. 2-10
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-12
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-14
Mirrors .................................................... 2-30
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-32
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-34
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-37
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-18
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-24
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-42
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-37
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-45
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-46
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-51
Tires
...................................................... 5-52
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-81
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-89
Electrical System ...................................... 5-90
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-96
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-98
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-13
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,
the PONTIAC Emblem and the name VIBE are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed when on the road. If the vehicle is sold, leave
this manual in it so the new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 06VIBE A First Printing
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
©
2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of
a component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-3
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Passenger Folding Seatback ............................1-6
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-7
Safety Belts .....................................................1-9
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-9
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14
Driver Position ..............................................1-14
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-22
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-22
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-22
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-25
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-25
Child Restraints .............................................1-26
Older Children ..............................................1-26
Infants and Young Children ............................1-28
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-31
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-36
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-37
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ............................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-45
Airbag System ...............................................1-49
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-52
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-55
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-57
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-57
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........1-58
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-59
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-64
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-64
Restraint System Check ..................................1-66
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-66
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-67
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Reclining Seatbacks
The driver seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat. To raise the seat, pull up on
the lever repeatedly until the seat is at the desired
height. To lower the seat, push down on the lever
repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat. Release the lever to lock the
seatback where you want it. Push on the seat to
make sure it is locked into position. Pull up on the lever
without pushing on the seatback, and the seat will go
to its original upright position.
It is easier to use the adjuster when the seat is
unoccupied.
1-3
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-4
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Head Restraints
Press the release button at
the base of the head
restraint and push the
restraint down to lower it.
Pull up on the head restraint to raise it.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The rear seats may have adjustable head restraints.
If so, they work the same way as the front head
restraints.
1-5
Passenger Folding Seatback
{CAUTION:
You can fold the front passenger’s seatback down to
allow for more cargo space or as a temporary table while
the vehicle is stopped. When the area is not being
used for more cargo space, the seatback should
be placed in the locked, upright position.
To fold the seatback down, do the following:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in which an
airbag would inflate. For more information,
see Where Are the Airbags? on page 1-52 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
{CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in
a crash. Remove or secure all items before
driving.
1-6
1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position and
make sure the seatback is at the most upright
position and locked.
2. Pull up on one of the
levers located on either
side of the back of
the passenger’s
seatback.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
You can fold either side of the seatback down for more
cargo space. The rear right side seatback can also
be used as a temporary table while the vehicle is
stopped. Make sure the front seatback isn’t reclined or
in the rearward most position. If it is, the rear seatback
won’t fold down all the way.
{CAUTION:
3. Fold the seatback down.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull up on one of the levers located on either side
of the back of the passenger’s seatback.
2. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock it into
place. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted or
caught in the seatback.
A rear seatback folded forward, or any other
object contacting or pressing the front
seatback may affect the proper functioning of
the passenger sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-59.
3. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it
is locked into position.
4. Use the reclining front seatback lever to adjust the
seatback to a comfortable position.
1-7
To fold either seatback down, do the following:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-8
1. Pull up on the lock
release knob, located
on the top outboard
side of the seatbacks.
2. Fold the seatback down. Each seatback can be
folded separately.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock it into
place. Make sure the safety belts are not twisted or
caught in the seatback.
2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it
is locked into position.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-27.
1-9
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-10
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-11
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-12
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-13
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-26
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-28. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-14
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-25.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment on page 1-21.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
1-15
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you. Adjust the
height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered
on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down, squeeze
the button (A) and move
the height adjuster to
the desired position.
You can move the height
adjuster up just by
pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without squeezing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-22
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear one properly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull
up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the
buckle does not click, check to be sure that you are
using the correct buckle. The buckle for the center
rear passenger position has the word CENTER on it.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-25.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-23
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the pelvic bones. And you would be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under
it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
1-24
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although
you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor
part of the safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
If the passenger sensing system detects that there is
not a passenger in the right front passenger position,
the safety belt pretensioner for that position will not
activate. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-59.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-67.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults. Never use
it for securing child seats. To wear it, just attach it to
the regular safety belt. For more information see
the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Always disconnect the extender from the safety belt after
you use it so that the airbag will work properly the
next time someone uses that seat.
When you use a safety belt extender in the right front
passenger’s seat, make sure the passenger airbag status
indicator shows “ON”. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-29. If the indicator shows “OFF”,
disconnect the extender’s latch from the buckle then
reconnect the safety belt. Make sure the indicator light
shows “ON”, then reconnect the safety belt extender. If
you use the safety belt extender while the indicator light
shows “OFF”, the right front passenger’s frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped) may not
activate correctly. See Airbag System on page 1-49 for
important safety information about your airbags.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. It is free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you.
1-25
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-26
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-27
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States
and in every Canadian province says children up to
some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-28
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-29
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-30
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-31
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-32
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
You may find these instructions on the restraint
itself or in a booklet, or both.
1-33
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
1-34
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-37 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of
the infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder
straps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may
take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which
rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a
wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
1-35
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”
This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-36
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-37
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-38
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child
restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the trim cover.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Rear Seat
1-39
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
The top tether anchors are located on the floor of the
rear cargo area. Flip open the trim cover to access the
anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the top
tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-36 for
additional information.
1-40
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a
LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Flip open the top tether anchor trim cover to
expose the anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
1-41
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether around the
head restraint.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between the
head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-37.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. If the buckle does not click, check
to be sure that you are using the correct buckle.
The buckle for the center rear passenger position
has the word CENTER on it.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-43
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and to
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-37.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if your child restraint has
a top tether, disconnect the top tether from the top
tether anchor. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let
it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely
again and be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-36.
In addition, your vehicle has the passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) when a
child in a child restraint or booster seat is detected.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-59
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29
for more information about the conditions that could
affect the passenger sensing system and other important
safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
1-45
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position, move the seat as far back
as it will go before securing the forward-facing child
restraint. See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-37.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position
if a national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has airbags. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-59. General Motors recommends
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the child restraint
in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
the off indicator in the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit when you turn the
ignition to ON. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-29.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-46
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-47
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
the off indicator in the passenger airbag status
indicator will be lit and stay lit when the key
is turned to ON.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
with the ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
1-48
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
If the airbag readiness light and the OFF light in the
passenger airbag status indicator come on together,
it may mean there is a malfunction in the passenger
sensing system. Secure the child in the child restraint in
a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with
your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have the following airbags:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated directly behind the
driver
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the passenger seated directly
behind that passenger
If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags,
it will say SRS-SIDE AIRBAG on a label on the
side of the driver’s and right front passenger’s seat
closest to the door.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags,
it will say SRS CURTAIN AIRBAG on the trim on
the side of the windshield.
1-49
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt, even if
you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. Airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
CAUTION:
1-50
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
(Continued)
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-26 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-28.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults,
CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28
for more information.
(Continued)
1-51
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-52
If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impact airbag
for the driver, it is in the side of the driver’s seatback
closest to the door.
If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impact airbag
for the right front passenger, it is in the side of the
passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-53
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbag
for the driver and the passenger seated directly
behind the driver, it is in the ceiling above the side
windows.
1-54
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbag
for the right front passenger and the passenger
seated directly behind that passenger, it is in the ceiling
above the side windows.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. If your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing
the rope or tie-down through any door or
window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating airbag will be blocked. Do not let seat
covers block the inflation path of a side impact
airbag. The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors,
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
1-55
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to
the underside of your vehicle such as hitting a curb,
falling into a deep hole, or landing hard.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,
rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-56
The side impact airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are
not intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts. Your vehicle has sensors
which detect side impacts. These sensors signal
the appropriate side airbag to inflate. A side impact
airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle
that is struck.
It is possible that, in a crash involving the front of your
vehicle, only one of the two frontal airbags in your vehicle
will deploy. This is rare, but it can happen in a crash just
severe enough to make a frontal airbag inflate.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and
near-frontal impacts. For side impact airbags, inflation is
determined by the location and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash.
The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag and
related hardware are all part of the airbag modules.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are also airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-mounted side impact
airbags, there are also airbag modules in the ceiling of
the vehicle, near the side window.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But a
frontal airbag would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward a frontal airbag. A side impact airbag
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including many frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear
impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward a side airbag. Airbags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions for frontal airbags, and only
in moderate to severe side collisions for side impact
airbags.
1-57
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbags inflated.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags deflate more
slowly and may still be at least partially inflated minutes
after the vehicle comes to rest. Some components of
the airbag module — the steering wheel hub for
the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest
to the door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped) and the area along the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows for the roof–mounted side
impact airbags (if equipped) — may be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
1-58
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to
do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-9
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
A passenger airbag status indicator on the instrument
panel will be visible when you turn your ignition key
to ON. The words ON and OFF will be visible in
the passenger airbag status indicator during the system
check. When the system check is complete, either
the word ON or the word OFF will be visible if there
is weight on the seat or the safety belt is buckled.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29.
The passenger sensing
system will turn off the
right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped)
under certain conditions.
system. Improper service can mean that the
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
The passenger sensing system will also turn off the
right front passenger’s safety belt pretensioner if
it detects that there is no occupant in that position.
The driver’s airbags and the roof-mounted side impact
airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system.
1-59
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat assembly
and safety belt assembly. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant
and determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped)
and safety belt pretensioner should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”
This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-60
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped), the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint with the
ignition key in the ACC or LOCK position, following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position on page 1-45.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
An object, person or child in the rear seat contacting or
pressing the right front passenger’s seatback, or
objects stowed under the right front passenger’s seat,
may affect the proper functioning of the passenger
sensing system.
When you use a safety belt extender in the right front
passenger’s seat, make sure the passenger airbag
status indicator shows “ON”. If the indicator shows
“OFF”, disconnect the extender’s latch from the buckle
then reconnect the safety belt. Make sure the indicator
light shows “ON”, then reconnect the safety belt
extender. If you use the safety belt extender while the
indicator light shows “OFF”, the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) may not activate correctly. See Airbag
System on page 1-49 for important safety information
about your airbags.
1-61
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) and
safety belt pretensioner anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right
front passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags and pretensioner to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind
you that the airbags and pretensioners are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
1-62
If the airbag readiness light and the OFF light in the
passenger airbag status indicator come on together,
it may mean there is a malfunction in the passenger
sensing system. All front passengers should move to
a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with
your dealer.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-28 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers or seat
backpacks can affect how well the passenger sensing
system operates. You may want to consider not
using seat covers, seat backpacks or other aftermarket
equipment if your vehicle has the passenger sensing
system. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-64 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-63
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Q: Is there anything I might add to the vehicle that
{CAUTION:
For up to two minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an airbag
when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with
yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the airbag systems. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-64
could keep the airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal
or height, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Also, the airbag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.
Do not perform any of the following changes
without consulting your dealer. Such changes can
interfere with the proper operation of the airbag
system, passenger sensing system and/or safety
belt pretensioners.
• Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor
assemblies
• Modification of the suspension system
• Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo
bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other
equipment to the front end
• Repairs made on or near the front fenders,
front end structure or console
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my advanced airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or the
instrument panel can affect the operation of
the advanced airbag system. If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 7-2.
• Installation of electronic devises such as a
mobile two-way radio, cassette tape player
or compact disc player
• Modification of the suspension system
• Modification of the front end structure or the side
structure of the passenger compartment
• Repairs made on or near the console of the
front seat
1-65
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-66
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback (if equipped), or the side impact airbag
covering on the ceiling near the side windows
(if equipped), the bag may not work properly.
You may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, the airbag module and seatback for the
driver’s and right front passenger’s seat-mounted
side impact airbags (if equipped), or side impact
airbag module and ceiling covering for the
roof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped).
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28.
1-67
✍ NOTES
1-68
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-6
Door Locks ....................................................2-6
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-7
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-8
Liftgate/Liftglass .............................................2-9
Windows ........................................................2-10
Manual Windows ..........................................2-11
Power Windows ............................................2-11
Sun Visors ...................................................2-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-12
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-12
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-14
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-14
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-15
Starting the Engine .......................................2-16
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-17
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-18
Overdrive Off ...............................................2-21
Manual Transaxle Operation ...........................2-21
Parking Brake ..............................................2-24
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) ......2-25
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) ................................2-26
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transaxle) .........2-27
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-28
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-28
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-29
Mirrors ...........................................................2-30
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-30
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-30
Outside Remote Control Mirrors ......................2-31
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-31
OnStar® System .............................................2-32
Storage Areas ................................................2-34
Glove Box ...................................................2-34
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-34
Coinholder(s) ................................................2-34
Instrument Panel Storage Area .......................2-34
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-34
Floor Mats ...................................................2-34
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-35
Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ...............2-36
Cargo Cover ................................................2-36
Cargo Tie Downs ..........................................2-37
Sunroof .........................................................2-37
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If the vehicle has the keyless entry system, it operates
on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes
the key tag from the key and gives it to the first owner.
Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the
tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be able to
have a new one made easily using this code.
If you need a new key, contact your dealership to obtain
the correct key code. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6 for more information.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
2-3
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
LOCK: Press this button to
lock all of the doors.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet
(9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle. The remote keyless entry
transmitter will look different if your vehicle was
purchased in Canada, however it will operate the same.
2-4
The turn signal lights will flash once to confirm that the
doors have locked. The remote keyless entry system
will not operate while the doors are open, the key is in
the ignition, or if the liftglass or hatch are not
completely closed and latched.
UNLOCK: Press this button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The turn signal lights will flash twice and the
interior lamps will come on to confirm that the door has
unlocked. If the UNLOCK button is pressed again within
three seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The
interior lamps will stay on for 15 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on.
HATCH/GLASS: Press and hold this button for
approximately one second to open the rear liftglass. If the
ignition key is in the ON position, the liftglass cannot be
opened by the HATCH/GLASS button on the transmitter.
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery, do the following:
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
1. Insert a small coin or similar object to separate the
bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces upward. For battery replacement, use
a three-volt battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
3. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
2-5
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-6
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter, if equipped. See Remote Keyless Entry
System Operation on page 2-4 for more information.
If your vehicle has power door locks, open the driver’s
door by turning the key in the lock toward the rear
of the vehicle. Turning the key back toward the center,
then toward the rear again will unlock all of the
doors. Using the key in the passenger’s door will also
unlock all of the doors.
Lock a door by turning the key toward the front of the
vehicle. If you have power door locks, all the doors
will lock.
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power door
lock switch is located
on the armrest of
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door.
To manually lock the door from the inside, press the
knob on the door forward. To unlock the door, press the
knob rearward. With manual locks, you must use the
key to lock and unlock the liftgate.
e (Power Door Lock): Press the top of the switch to
lock all the doors. Press the bottom of the switch to
unlock all the doors.
2-7
Rear Door Security Locks
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks
that help prevent passengers from opening the rear
doors on your vehicle from the inside.
To open a rear door with the security lock, do
the following:
The security locks are
located on the inside of
the rear door trim.
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults and
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to
open the rear door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how these security locks
work, and how to cancel the locks.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the
door from the outside.
2. Slide the lever up.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Slide the lever down.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
2-8
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Liftgate/Liftglass
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control system
to its highest speed and select the control
setting that will force outside air into your
vehicle. See “Climate Control System” in
the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-28.
Liftgate/Liftglass Release
To unlock and open the liftgate using the key, insert the
key into the keyhole and turn counterclockwise. Raise
the liftgate by hand.
When closing the liftgate, use the handle to pull it down.
To lock the liftgate, turn the key clockwise to the first
position.
2-9
To open the liftglass using the key, insert the key into
the keyhole and turn clockwise to the second position.
Use the handle in the center of the liftglass to help
in lifting the glass.
Your vehicle may have a
liftglass release button
which is located on
the instrument panel to the
left of the steering
wheel. Press this button to
release the liftglass.
2-10
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Power Windows
If your vehicle has this
feature, the switches
controlling the driver’s
and passenger’s windows
are located on the
driver’s door.
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each window.
The power window switch on each passenger door
controls that window only. These switches work while
the ignition is turned to ON.
Press the front of a switch to lower a window and lift the
front of the switch to raise a window.
AUTO (Express-Down): Press this switch all the way
down and release it to lower the driver’s window quickly.
o (Lock-Out): Press the window lock-out button,
located near the driver’s power door lock switches, to
disable the passenger’s power window switches.
Press the button again to enable the window switches.
Only the driver’s window will operate with the lock-out
button pressed.
2-11
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. You can
also swing them to the side.
The visors can be slid along the rod for extended
coverage for the side windows unless your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Swing down the sun visor to expose the vanity mirror.
The vanity mirror may have a cover. Lift the cover
to expose the mirror.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
The alarm will sound the horn intermittently and flash
the headlamps, turn signal lamps and interior lights.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s side doors are
unlocked forcibly, the other side doors and the liftgate
will be locked automatically.
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and
remove it.
2. Close and lock all doors and liftgate with the key or
remote keyless entry transmitter.
The indicator light located
on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering
wheel will come on when
all doors and liftgate
are closed and locked.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If your vehicle has this feature, the theft-deterrent
system is designed to activate an alarm if any of the
side doors or the liftgate is forcibly unlocked or if
the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected while the system is set.
2-12
The system will be automatically set after
30 seconds. When the system is set, the indicator
light will start flashing.
3. After the indicator light starts flashing, you may
leave the vehicle.
Do not leave anyone in the vehicle when you set
the system, because unlocking the vehicle from the
inside will activate the system.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm, do the following:
How the System Alarm is Activated
The system will activate the alarm under the following
conditions:
• If the driver’s or front passenger’s door is unlocked
or if any of the other doors or the liftgate is forcibly
opened without the key or remote keyless entry
transmitter.
1. Open all the windows.
• If the battery terminal is disconnected and then
2. Set the system as described in the previous
procedure. The doors and liftgate should be locked
with the key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Be sure to wait until the indicator light starts
flashing.
• If the ignition is hot-wired.
• If the side window glass is broken or damaged.
3. Unlock the driver’s door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.
4. Stop the alarm as described in the disarming
procedure following.
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors. Also
check that the system is activated when the
battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
If the system does not work properly, have it
checked by your dealer.
reconnected.
The indicator light will come on when the system
is activated.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s doors are unlocked
without using the key or remote keyless entry
transmitter, the other doors and the liftgate will be
automatically locked again.
After one minute the alarm will automatically stop and
the indicator light will start flashing again.
2-13
Reactivating the System
Once the system is set, it will automatically reset the
alarm after the alarm stops. The alarm will activate again
under the same conditions as described earlier.
Disarming the System
The alarm can be disarmed by doing one of the
following:
• Turn the ignition key from LOCK to ON.
• Unlock any of the doors with the key or with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
If the liftgate or liftglass is opened with the key, the
system will still be activated.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-40 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-14
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
(A) LOCK: This is the only position from which you can
remove the key. This locks your steering wheel,
ignition and automatic transaxle. Push in the ignition
switch as you turn the key toward you.
If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition switch
cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the key
to LOCK and removing it will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer
the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you
need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is
moving, turn the key only to ACC. Do not push
the key in while the vehicle is moving.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
cannot turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the key
hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these work, then your vehicle
needs service.
(B) ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates some
of your electrical accessories, such as the radio, but
not the ventilation fan. It unlocks the steering wheel and
ignition. To move the key from ACC to LOCK, push
in the key and then turn it to LOCK.
2-15
(C) ON: This is the position the switch returns to after
you start your engine and release the switch. The switch
stays in the ON position when the engine is running.
But even when the ignition is not running, you can use
ON to operate your electrical accessories, including
the ventilation fan and 115 volt power outlet, and
to display some warning and indicator lights.
(D) START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON for normal driving.
When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you
to operate some of your electrical accessories.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
when the ignition is still in ACC or LOCK and the
key is in the ignition.
2-16
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). The
engine will not start in any other position — that is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down — that is a
safety feature.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When the engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
run your engine at high speed when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. In
very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
electrical cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment.
2-17
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Automatic Transaxle Operation
There are several
different positions for
your shift lever.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-18
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 2-25. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.
Ensure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot
shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever, push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and
release the shift lever button as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting
Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) on page 2-26.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
on page 4-30.
2-19
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 27 mph (43 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
2-20
• Going about 29 mph (47 km/h) or more, push your
accelerator pedal all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power than
DRIVE (D) but lower fuel economy. You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
LOW (L): This position gives you even more power
than SECOND (2) but lower fuel economy. You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift
into low gear until the vehicle is going slow enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the vehicle
in place.
Overdrive Off
Manual Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle
has an O/D (overdrive off)
button located on the
left side of the shift lever.
Press the O/D button to turn off overdrive. A light on the
instrument panel cluster will come on when this
feature is used. Press the button again to turn overdrive
back on. Then the light on the instrument panel
cluster will go off. See Overdrive Off Light on page 3-40.
When you turn on your vehicle the overdrive will
automatically be on until you turn it off.
Five-Speed Transaxle
FIRST (1): Press the
clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the
accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
2-21
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift
to NEUTRAL.
Six-Speed Transaxle
FIRST (1): Press the clutch
pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let
up on the clutch pedal
as you press the
accelerator pedal.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the
clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your
vehicle is stopped.
Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parking brake
for parking your vehicle.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3): Press the clutch pedal and upshift into
THIRD (3). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
2-22
FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5), SIXTH (6): Shift into
FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the same
way you do for THIRD (3). Slowly let up on the
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,
press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and
shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the
clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your
vehicle is stopped.
Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parking brake
for parking your vehicle. There is an audible beep when
the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) to ensure that FIRST (1)
gear and REVERSE (R) are not confused.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of your vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
This chart shows when to shift to the next gear for the
best fuel economy.
Manual Transmission Recommended
Shift Speeds
Engine
1 to 2 or 2 to 3 or 3 to 4 or 4 to 5 or 5 to 6 or
2 to 1
3 to 2
4 to 3
5 to 4
6 to 5
1.8 L
15 mph 25 mph 40 mph 45 mph
—
(Code 8) 24 km/h 40 km/h 64 km/h 72 km/h
1.8 L
15 mph 25 mph 40 mph 45 mph 50 mph
(Code L) 24 km/h 40 km/h 64 km/h 72 km/h 80 km/h
If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift
to the next lower gear. You may have to downshift
two or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly
or for good performance.
2-23
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-40.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the lever all the way down.
2-24
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
To shift into PARK (P), do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake by pulling up on the parking
brake lever.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key in your hand, your
vehicle is in PARK (P).
If you have to leave your automatic transaxle vehicle
with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in
PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved the shift lever
into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then,
see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-25
Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may
put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle.
You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of
PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)
properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find
out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 2-25.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-26
Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is in ON. See Automatic Transaxle Operation
on page 2-18.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever – push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
and release the shift lever button as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever into the gear you wish.
Shift Lock Release
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition to LOCK. Make sure the parking
brake is applied.
2. Carefully pry the
cover from the shift
lock override, located
to the right of the
shift lever.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle)
Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever
into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the parking
brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into
REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can
turn the ignition key to OFF, remove the key and
release the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.
Evaporation Pump
Your vehicle is equipped with a vacuum pump for the
vehicle’s fuel evaporation system. This pump performs a
fuel evaporation leakage text approximately five hours
after the engine is turned off. You may hear a sound
coming from underneath the rear cargo compartment for
several minutes.
3. Insert the end of a flat-tipped tool into the round slot
and press down firmly.
The noise is normal and does not signify a malfunction.
See you dealer with any questions.
4. While maintaining brake application, move the shift
lever into the drive gear you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
2-27
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
2-28
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-28.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 2-25.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-26.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.
2-29
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the
mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle.
Grip the mirror in the center to move it up or down and
side to side.
The control at the bottom of the mirror is the day/night
feature that allows adjustment to the mirror so that
the glare of headlamps from behind is reduced. Pull the
control for night driving to reduce glare; push it to
return to the day position.
The mirror may have map lights beneath the mirror.
Push the switch to turn each light on or off.
2-30
Manual Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
The vehicle may have an inside rearview mirror with
OnStar®. See your GM dealer for more information on
the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See
OnStar® System on page 2-32 for information on the
services OnStar® provides.
While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the mirror
so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip the
mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to
side. The control at the bottom of the mirror is the
day/night feature that allows adjustment to the mirror so
that the glare of headlamps from behind is reduced.
Move the control from left to right for day or night
conditions.
Outside Remote Control Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
Your vehicle has outside power adjustable mirrors.
The controls are located
to the left of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
To adjust either mirror, push the button labeled L (left)
or R (right). Use the arrows on the control pad to adjust
the direction of the mirror. Once both mirrors have
been adjusted, move the selector switch back to the
center. This prevents the mirrors from being moved once
they have been adjusted.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat.
2-31
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar® Emergency where we
can request emergency services be sent to your
location. If you lock your keys in the car, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,
press the OnStar® button and they will get you the help
you need.
2-32
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year, or upgrade to the Directions and Connections®
Plan to meet your needs. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak to an advisor.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few
simple voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile
at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide
for more information.
2-33
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the
handle upward.
Cupholder(s)
There are two fixed cupholders located in the console
area between the two front seats. There are also
two cupholders that fold out of the rear of the console
storage unit.
Coinholder(s)
Your instrument panel may have a coinholder located to
the left of the steering wheel and on the center
console near the parking brake.
Instrument Panel Storage Area
There are storage compartments located on the
instrument panel in two places. They are below the
interior/instrument panel brightness dial and below the
shift lever. Pull the top of the door toward you to open it
or for the compartment below the shift lever, push the
button to open it.
Center Console Storage Area
A storage area is located in the console between
the seats.
To access the storage area, pull up the lock release
lever while raising the lid.
Floor Mats
The driver’s side floor mat is held in place by
two locator hooks.
Be sure the driver’s side floor mat is properly placed on
the floor so that it does not block the movement of
the accelerator pedal.
2-34
How to Remove and Replace the
Floor Mat
To remove the floor mat,
pull up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect it
from the locator hooks.
To reinstall the floor mat, line up the openings in the
floor mat over the locator hooks and push down
into place.
Rear Storage Area
A storage area is located under the rear cargo area
floor panel.
Turn the knobs on the floor
panel to unlock the
storage area access cover.
Be sure to lock the access cover to close it securely.
2-35
Rear Cargo Accessory
Track System
Your vehicle has a track system located on the floor of
the rear cargo area. This system can be used to
carry accessories in your vehicle in many ways by using
the tie-down anchors provided in your vehicle or
accessory packages available from your GM dealer.
Make sure the cargo being carried in the rear cargo area
is secure. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
2-36
Cargo Cover
To use the cargo cover, loosen the straps and attach
the side hooks of the cargo cover to the upper tie down
hooks located along both sides of the rear cargo
area. Pull straps to adjust.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you put
it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
Cargo Tie Downs
Sunroof
The tire tie-down straps are designed to secure a flat
tire. You can also use the straps and hooks to
secure your luggage.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, it can be opened or put in a
tilt position. To tilt the sunroof, slide the sunshade
rearward, then press the switch marked UP. Press the
other end of the switch to lower the sunroof. The ignition
must be in the ON position for the switch to work.
To open or close the sunroof, press the switch marked
SLIDE rearward or forward. The sunroof will close
partially and stop. Once the sunroof stops, release the
switch and press the button again to fully close it.
The sunroof can be opened to any position. The
sunshade will open when the sunroof is opened. The
sunshade must be closed manually.
There are eight tie-down hooks located in the rear of
the vehicle. The straps are located under the cargo area
floor panel. To use the straps, hook the ends to the
lower tie-down hooks in a criss-cross pattern across the
cargo. Pull on the straps at the buckle to tighten the
straps as needed.
2-37
✍ NOTES
2-38
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-14
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-15
Interior Lamps Control ...................................3-15
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-16
Reading Lamps ............................................3-16
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-16
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........3-17
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-18
Climate Control System .................................3-18
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-24
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-25
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-26
Trip Odometers ............................................3-26
Tachometer .................................................3-27
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-27
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-28
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-29
Charging System Light ..................................3-31
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-32
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-33
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ....................3-33
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-34
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..............................3-34
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-35
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-38
Lights On Reminder ......................................3-39
Taillamp Indicator Light ..................................3-39
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-39
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Overdrive Off Light ........................................3-40
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-40
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-40
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-40
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-41
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-41
Audio System(s) .............................................3-42
Setting the Time ...........................................3-43
Radio with CD (Base Level) ...........................3-43
3-2
Radio with CD (MP3) ....................................3-54
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-66
Radio Reception ...........................................3-77
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-78
Care of the CD Player ...................................3-78
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-78
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-78
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-25.
C. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-18.
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
E. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-42.
F. Rear Window Defogger Button. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Climate Control System on
page 3-18.
G. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-29. Front
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light. See Safety
Belt Reminder Light on page 3-27.
H. Power Remote Control Mirror Button. See Outside
Remote Control Mirrors on page 2-31.
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-15.
J. Rear Liftglass Release Button. See Liftgate/Liftglass
on page 2-9.
K. Tire Pressure Monitor Reset Button. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 5-60.
L. Coinholder. See Coinholder(s) on page 2-34.
M. TRAC OFF Button. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9.
N. Content Theft-Deterrent Security Light. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-12.
O. Storage Compartment. See Instrument Panel
Storage Area on page 2-34.
P. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever and Exterior Lamp
Stalk. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on
page 3-7 and Exterior Lamps on page 3-13.
Q. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
R. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
S. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
T. Cruise Control Lever (Option). See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.
U. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-15.
V. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield Wipers
on page 3-8.
W. Cigarette Lighter or Accessory Power Outlet. See
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-18
or Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-16.
X. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on
page 2-18.
Y. Power Outlet. See Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current on page 3-17.
Z. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-24.
AA. Center Console Storage Area. See Center Console
Storage Area on page 2-34.
AB. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-34.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located in
the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition switch.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt steering column allows you to adjust the steering
column before you drive. You can also raise it to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
exit and enter the vehicle.
The tilt lever is located
underneath, on the left
side of the steering
wheel column.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
To tilt the column, move the lever downward. Adjust the
steering wheel to a comfortable position, then move
the lever upward to lock the column in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has an upward (for right) and a
downward (for left) position. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
The turn signal/multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
This lever operates the following:
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
• Exterior Lamps. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-13.
• Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.
• Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-15.
If you signal a turn or a lane change and notice the
arrow flashing rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out
and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, have it replaced to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-91.
3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
The headlamps must be on for this feature to work.
For high beams, push the turn signal lever away
from you.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on.
It will go off when you switch to the low beams. To
switch back to low beams, pull the lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
With the lever in the low-beam position, pull the lever
toward you to momentarily switch to high beams
(to signal that you are going to pass). If you have the
headlamps on when you release the lever, they will
return to the low beams.
3-8
The lever on the right side of the steering column
controls the windshield wipers and washer.
The available positions are the following:
MIST: For a single wiping cycle, move the lever to
MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe.
OFF: The wipers are off.
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to INT to choose a
delayed wiping cycle. In light rain or snow, you might
want to use this position rather than continuous wiping.
You can change the time between wipes by turning
the INT band. Turn the band forward or rearward
for longer or shorter delay interval.
Windshield Washer
LO (Low): Move the lever to LO for steady wiping at
low speed.
The knob automatically returns from the position after
you release it.
HI (High): Move the lever to HI for steady wiping at
high speed.
REAR: To turn on the rear window wiper, twist the end
of the lever upward to LO or HI. The wiper does not
work with the rear liftglass open.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Pull the lever toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The spray will continue until you release the
lever. The wipers will run a few times. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-36.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-9
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Cruise Control
To squirt washer fluid on the rear window, twist the
knob upward or downward as far as it will go. The knob
automatically returns from these positions after you
release it.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
window, check the fluid level.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-10
If your vehicle has cruise control, the lever is located on
the right side of the steering wheel.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Press the ON-OFF button at the end of the cruise
control lever. The CRUISE light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on. See Cruise Control Light
on page 3-39 for more information.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Move the lever down to −SET and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-11
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This will shut off cruise
control. But you won’t need to reset it.
If the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or greater,
push the lever up to +RES (Resume/Accelerate). Your
vehicle will go right back up to your chosen speed
and stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are three ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Move the lever down to −SET. Release the
lever and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise lever up to +RES. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the lever.
• To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the lever to +RES briefly and then release
it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-12
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Push and hold the lever to −SET until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the lever
down briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake or downshifting to SECOND (2) or
LOW (L) takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are several ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the
clutch pedal, if you have a manual transaxle.
• Press the ON-OFF button again.
• Pull the cruise control lever toward you.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
O(Exterior Lamps): Turn the outside part of the
lever with the symbol on it, to operate the lamps. For
vehicles sold in the U. S., this symbol will appear on the
instrument panel cluster when your exterior lamps are on.
The exterior lamp switch has three positions:
OFF: Turning the switch to this position turns off all
lamps, except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
O (Parking Lamps): Turning the switch to this position
turns on the parking lamps together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamp
Instrument Panel Lights
A symbol will appear on the instrument panel cluster
when your parking lamps are on. See Lights On
Reminder on page 3-39 and Taillamp Indicator Light on
page 3-39 for additional information.
3(Headlamps): Turning the switch to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
3-13
Headlamps on Reminder
If you turn the ignition to LOCK or ACC and leave
the lamps on, you’ll hear a tone when you open the
driver’s door.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
a reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
• The ignition is on with the engine running.
• The exterior lamps switch is off.
• The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on
at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel
won’t be lit up either.
When you turn the exterior lamp switch to the headlamp
position, your DRL will go off and your headlamps will
come on. The other lamps that come on with your
headlamps will also come on.
3-14
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
See “Automatic Headlamp System” following.
When you turn the exterior lamp switch off, the regular
lamps will go off and your headlamps will change to
the reduced brightness of DRL provided it is not
dark outside. DRL also comes on if only the parking
lamps are being used.
Automatic Headlamp System
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic light sensor
on the top left corner of the instrument panel, so be sure it
is not covered or the headlamps will be on continuously.
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your low-beam headlamps
at the normal brightness along with other lamps such
as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and
instrument panel lights. This is indicated by the
headlamp symbol on your instrument panel cluster. See
Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-25.
If you are driving through a parking garage, overcast
weather, or a tunnel, the automatic headlamp system
may turn on your low-beam headlamps at a normal
brightness along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking
lamps and the instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will be dimmer, and the instrument panel cluster
lights may dim. There will be a delay before the
lights will turn on when starting the car at night.
Fog Lamps
- (Fog Lamps): Turn the band on the turn signal/
multifunction lever to the fog lamp symbol to turn the fog
lamps on. They will come on only when the headlamps
are on low beam.
Turn the wheel all the way up for the maximum setting.
It is recommended that the brightness level be kept
at the maximum setting for all daytime driving to ensure
proper visibility.
The brightness of the instrument panel lights will
decrease when the headlamps are on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Interior Lamps Control
Instrument Panel Brightness
The interior lights control is located on the overhead
light. To change the interior lights setting, slide the
switch to one of the following positions:
The instrument panel
brightness control is
located to the left of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel. Turn the
wheel on the left of the
control up or down
to increase or decrease
brightness.
OFF: This position turns the light off.
ON: This position keeps the light on all the time.
6 (Door): This position turns the light on when any
door, the liftgate or the liftglass is opened. The light
goes off when all the side doors, the liftgate and
the liftglass are closed.
3-15
Entry Lighting
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
While the interior lights control is in the door position,
the light will come on when any side door, the liftgate or
the liftglass is opened. After all the doors, liftgate and
liftglass are closed, and the key is out of the ignition, in
LOCK or ACC, the light will remain on for about
15 seconds and then go out except under the
following conditions:
With the accessory power outlet, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment.
• The ignition is turned to ACC or ON after all the
doors, the liftgate and the liftglass are closed.
• All the doors and liftgate are locked when the
liftglass is closed and the light is still on.
When any door is unlocked with the key or remote
keyless entry system transmitter, the light comes on for
15 seconds, even if the door is not opened.
Reading Lamps
If you have a sunroof, you will have a reading lamp
near the sunroof switch. Press the button to turn
the lamp on and press it again to turn it off.
If you do not have a sunroof, your vehicle’s inside
rearview mirror may be equipped with reading lamps. If
your vehicle is equipped with reading lamps, there
are two buttons located on the bottom of the mirror.
Press the buttons to turn the lamps on and press them
again to turn the lamps off.
3-16
Your vehicle has an outlet under the climate controls.
To use the outlet, the ignition must be in ON or
ACC. Pull down the small cover to access the outlet.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have
maximum current levels. Do not use equipment
exceeding the maximum amperage rating.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the power accessory outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem see your dealer for additional information on the
power accessory plugs.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the proper installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Power Outlet 115 Volt
Alternating Current
With this power outlet, you can plug in auxiliary electrical
equipment with a maximum limit of 115 VAC. If you
try to use equipment that requires more than the limit, a
protection circuit will cut the power supply. The power
will automatically restart when equipment that operates
within the limit is plugged in.
The power outlet is located near the center of the
instrument panel. Before using the outlet, turn on the
ignition and press the button next to the outlet. An
indicator light in the button will come on. After using the
outlet, press the button again to turn it off.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and they may not work properly:
• Equipment with high initial peak wattage:
cathode-ray tube type televisions,
compressor-driven refrigerators, electric
power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply: microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
3-17
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To use the lighter, if your vehicle has one, push the
lighter in all the way and let go. When it’s ready, it will
pop back out by itself. If the engine is not running,
the key must be in ACC to use the lighter.
It is not recommended to use the cigarette lighter to
plug in auxiliary electrical equipment. Use the accessory
power outlet for phones and other electrical equipment.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-16 or
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current on page 3-17.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Your vehicle may have a removable ashtray that sits in
your front cupholder in the center console storage area.
3-18
Operation
9 (Fan):
Turn the center knob away from OFF to turn
the system on. Turn the knob toward HI to increase
fan speed.
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest
setting, the passenger compartment air filter may
need to be replaced. For more information, see
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-22 and
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the upper
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
This mode directs the air to the upper
instrument panel outlets, and to the floor outlets.
6(Floor):
This mode directs the air to the floor outlets
and to the outboard outlets (for the side windows).
? (Recirculation):
Press this button, located in the
center of the instrument panel to the left of the audio
system, to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
This mode keeps outside air from coming in the vehicle.
It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from
entering your vehicle or to help heat or cool the air
inside your vehicle more quickly. When the button is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will come
on. Press the button again to turn off recirculate and to
circulate outside air through the system. The indicator
light will go off. Recirculate is automatically turned
off when the climate control system mode knob is turned
to defog or defrost or is between modes.
Temperature Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button, located in
the center of the instrument panel to the left of the audio
system, to turn the air-conditioning system on or off.
When A/C is pressed, an indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the air conditioning
is activated.
MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): Press the
A/C and recirculation buttons at the same time to select
MAX A/C.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
3-19
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to clear
fog from the rear window.
- (Defog):
This mode directs the air between the
windshield, side windows, instrument panel outlets and
the floor outlets. The air-conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting without pressing A/C, unless
the outside temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C).
1 (Defrost):
This mode directs the air to the
windshield, instrument panel outlets and the side
windows. The air-conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting without pressing A/C, unless
the outside temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C).
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-20
The rear window defogger
button is located on the
center of the instrument
panel, above the audio
system. The defogger does
not operate with the rear
liftglass opened.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in the ON position.
=(Rear Defogger): Press the defogger button to turn
the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light
in the button will come on to let you know that the rear
window defogger is activated. Be sure to clear as
much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off automatically
approximately 15 minutes after the button is pressed.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Outlet Adjustment
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information,
see “Passenger Compartment Air Filter” following
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.
Use the air outlets located in the center and outboard
sides of the instrument panel, to change the direction of
the air flowing through the vents.
3-21
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The access panel for the air filter is behind the glove
box. To replace the filter, follow these steps:
Passenger compartment air, both outside and
recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment air filter. The filter removes certain
contaminants from the air, including pollen and dust
particles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur more
quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs
to be replaced early. An air filter is available through
your dealer. For how often to change the air filter,
see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.
1. Lower the glove box door and remove the screw on
the right side of the glovebox with a tool. Slide the
arm of the glovebox off.
2. Push each side of the glovebox in and pull
toward you.
3-22
3. Lift the snaps on the filter cover to remove
the cover.
4. Remove the air filter.
5. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
It will not cause damage to your vehicle if you choose
not to replace the air filter after removing it. However,
the air coming into your vehicle will not be filtered.
3-23
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-24
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous. So please get to know your
warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, how much fuel is left in the tank and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
United States Cluster shown, Canada similar
3-25
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in miles.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it cannot, then it is set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed. See your
GM dealer for more information.
Trip Odometers
The trip odometers can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
3-26
The button located on the
right side of the instrument
panel cluster allows you
to switch between the
odometer and the
two trip odometers.
Press the button once to switch to TRIP A and again to
switch to TRIP B. To return the display to the odometer
reading, press the trip odometer button again.
To set the trip odometers to zero, press and hold
the button.
Tachometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The tachometer
shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also flash until the driver’s
belt is buckled. If the
driver’s belt is already
buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
Your vehicle also has a safety belt reminder light for the
right front passenger position.
Temperature Display
The outside air temperature is displayed on the center
of the instrument panel, within the speedometer.
The display will show the outside air temperature
in Fahrenheit with a range from −22°F to 122°F
(−30°C to 50°C).
3-27
This light is located on
the center of the
instrument panel,
above the
audio system.
When the key is turned to ON or START, this light will
come on as a reminder for the right front passenger
to fasten the safety belt. The safety belt light will flash
until the right front passenger’s safety belt is buckled.
The passenger’s safety belt reminder light will not
illuminate if the right front passenger’s belt is already
buckled or if a sensor does not detect the weight
of a passenger in that seat.
If something is placed on the right front passenger’s
seat, the sensors in the seat may detect that object and
cause the right front passenger’s safety belt reminder
light to come on. If this ever happens, move the object
to the rear seat or place it in a rear storage area, if
at all possible.
3-28
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
Airbag System on page 1-49.
This light will come on for
about seven seconds
when you start your
vehicle. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a passenger airbag status indicator in
the instrument panel.
If the airbag readiness light stays on or keeps
flashing after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system and safety belt pretension
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate without a
crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced right away if
the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should come on for about
seven seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
The indicator next to the passenger airbag status
indicator lights is the passenger safety belt reminder
light. See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-27 for
more information on that indicator.
When the ignition key is turned to ON, the passenger
airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF as a
system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF if there is weight on the seat
or if the safety belt is buckled, to let you know the
status of the right front passenger’s frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped.)
3-29
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
whenever possible.
If the word ON is lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s frontal
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped)
are enabled (may inflate).
3-30
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF is lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system
has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped). See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-59 for information
about the conditions that may affect the airbag system
and also important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of an airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-28.
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition, but the engine is
not running, as a check to
show you it is working.
Then it should go out when
the engine starts.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
It could indicate that you have a loose generator drive
belt or another electrical problem. Have it checked
right away. Driving while this light is on could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the charging
system light on, be certain to turn off all your
accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
3-31
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-33 and Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-37.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this light should
come on when you turn the key to START. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there’s a problem.
3-32
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
United States
Canada
With the anti-lock brake system, the light will come on
when your engine is started and may stay on for several
seconds. That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Or, if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning light
isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-32.
This light should come on
briefly as you start the
engine. It will then come on
only when a low tire
pressure condition exists.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-60 for
more information.
3-33
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
This light should come on
briefly when you start the
engine. If it stays on or
comes on while you
are driving, there is a
problem with your traction
control system.
The traction control system warning light comes on for a
few seconds when the ignition is turned to ON. It will
come on again when you press the TRAC OFF button to
turn off the traction control system. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
In the following cases, contact your dealer:
• The indicator light does not come on when the
ignition is turned to ON.
• The indicator light remains on after the ignition is
turned ON.
• The indicator light comes on with the normal driving
mode while driving.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
This light warns that there
is a problem somewhere in
the traction control system
or the vehicle stability
control (VSC) system.
The light will come on when the ignition is turned to ON
and will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the system does not
work. However, as conventional braking operates
when applied, there is no problem to continue driving.
In the following cases, contact your GM dealer:
• The warning light does not come on after the
ignition is turned to ON.
• The warning light remains on after the ignition is
turned to ON.
• The warning light comes on while driving.
The traction control system light will come on when the
VSC warning light comes on, even if the TRAC OFF
button is not pressed.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for
more information on Vehicle Stability Control System.
3-34
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
United States
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is
too hot! It means that your engine has overheated. You
should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn
off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-28.
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
3-35
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or replacement tires that do not match your
vehicle’s original tires can affect your vehicle’s
emission controls and may cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This may also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-36
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Reducing vehicle speed
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that may
have developed.
3-37
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a problem with
your oil, this light may stay
on after you start your
engine or come on when
you are driving.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
This indicates that there is not enough oil pressure to
keep your engine properly lubricated and cool.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
The engine could be low on oil, or have some other oil
related problem. Have it fixed right away.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations.
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working, but the light will go out when you
turn the ignition to START. If it does not come on
with the ignition on, you may have a problem
with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, the
light may blink on and off. Have it checked at your
GM dealer.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. Have it checked at your GM dealer.
3-38
Taillamp Indicator Light
{CAUTION:
This light will come
on when your taillamps
are on.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Canada Only
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the headlights
are on.
See Exterior Lamps on page 3-13 for more information.
Cruise Control Light
The CRUISE light appears
whenever you use the
ON-OFF button to set your
cruise control. See
Cruise Control Light
on page 3-39 for
more information.
See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3-14 for more
information.
3-39
Overdrive Off Light
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Your automatic transaxle
has overdrive. The light
will come on whenever you
turn off the overdrive.
See Overdrive Off
on page 2-21 for more
information.
This light will come on
when your windshield
washer fluid is low.
Canada Only
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
3-40
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36 for more
information.
Door Ajar Light
This light will come on if
any door, the rear liftgate
or the rear liftglass are
not completely closed.
Fuel Gage
Here are five things some owners ask about. None of
these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads F or full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill it.
• It takes the gage several minutes to read F or full
after filling the vehicle with fuel.
• The gage moves a little when you turn, stop or
United States
Canada
speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to E or empty when you
Your fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in your
tank. There is an arrow on the fuel gage that indicates
that the fuel filler door is on the driver’s side of your
vehicle. The fuel gage works only when the ignition
switch is ON. When the gage first indicates E or empty,
you still have a little fuel left, about 1 or 2 gallons
(3.8 L or 7.6 L), but you need to get more right away.
When your vehicle is low on fuel the low fuel warning
light, located below the empty mark, will also come on to
remind you to add fuel.
turn off the ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light is located on the fuel gage and comes on
when the fuel tank is low on fuel. To turn it off, add fuel
to the fuel tank. See Fuel on page 5-5 for more
information.
3-41
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
3-42
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Setting the Time
Radio with CD (Base Level)
The radio may have a button marked with an H or
HR to represent hours and an M or MIN to
represent minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. AM will appear for morning
hours. Press and hold the minute button until the correct
minute appears on the display. The time can be set
with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on
the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
The radio has a blinking red light that is used as a
theft-deterrent feature. The light will blink whenever the
ignition is off.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
3-43
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program
being broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if equipped).
XM™ offers over 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
3-44
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to display the time with
the ignition off.
For RDS, push the RCL button to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name
of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL button while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, push the RCL
button until you see the display you want, then hold the
button until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
w SEEK x:
Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you
hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either
SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the
preset number appear on the display. You will hear
a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset
station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID,
or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the tone control can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To return all of the tone controls to the middle position
press and hold the TONE button until FLAT appears
on the display.
3-45
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Up to six customized equalization settings, can be
programmed, by performing the following steps:
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press and release this button
until BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the speakers can
be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the
EQ symbol will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the
EQ number.
5. Press and hold the EQ button to store the
equalization setting and the number. EQ SAVED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings
and numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with
talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.
3-46
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press and release this button until FADE
appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator
will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. Turn
the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
To return all speaker settings to the middle position,
press and hold the BAL FADE button for two seconds.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol will appear on
the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the PTY
is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once. If the
PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice
to display the PTY and then to go to another station.
5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
w SCAN x: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will
scan for stations with the selected PTY and
traffic announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
3-47
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
RDS Messages
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return, if program type select mode
is on.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view the last message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
3-48
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
Press this button to receive the traffic announcement
from the station and brackets will be displayed around
TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
Radio Messages
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-49
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit
Language Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-50
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in
another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot
be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received,
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-51
Playing a CD
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you insert a CD with the radio off and the ignition
on, it will start to play.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-78 for
more information.
\1 (Forward):
3-52
Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select an equalization
setting while playing a CD. The equalization will be set
whenever a CD is played. See “EQ” listed previously
for more information. If you select an EQ setting for your
CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
w SEEK x:
Press the down arrow to go to the start
of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. Press the up arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving backward or forward
through the CD.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN and the track number
appear on the display and you hear a beep. The CD will
go to the next track, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default on
the display, track and elapsed time, push the button
until you see the display you want, then hold the button
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default. While elapsed time is showing, CD
TIME will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-53
CD Messages
Radio with CD (MP3)
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
The radio has a blinking red light that is used as a
theft-deterrent feature. The light will blink whenever the
ignition is off.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
3-54
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program
being broadcast.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is turned off, push this button to display
the time.
To change the default on the display, push the RCL
button until you see the display you want, then hold the
button until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you
hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either
SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the
preset number appear on the display and you will
hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-55
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID,
or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the tone control can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
Pressing and holding the TONE button until FLAT
appears on the display will return all of the tone
controls to the middle position.
3-56
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
bass, midrange, and treble equalization settings.
Up to six customized equalization settings, can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the desired equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the
EQ symbol will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the
desired EQ number.
5. Press and hold the EQ button to store the
equalization setting and the number. You will hear a
beep and EQ SAVED will appear on the display.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings
and numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with
talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press and release this button
until BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the speakers can
be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press and release this button until FADE
appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator
will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. Turn
the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for
two seconds will return all speaker settings to the
middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY)
Station (RDS)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol will appear on
the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and to take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, and the
PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once.
If the PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK
arrow twice to display the PTY and then to go to
another station.
5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will
search for stations with the selected PTY and
traffic announcements.
w SCAN x: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
3-57
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return, if program type select mode is
activated.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-58
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and READING DISC and the
CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the eject
button or push the RCL button.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
of Your CDs on page 3-78 for more information.
3-59
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
\ 1 (Forward):
Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
RDM 2 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
# 3 (Next Folder):
This button does not have a
function for non-MP3 CDs.
3-60
4 s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
6 ! (Previous Folder): This button does not have a
function for non-MP3 CDs.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired
customized equalization setting while playing a CD. The
equalization will be automatically set whenever a CD is
played. See “EQ” listed previously for more information.
w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to the start of
the next track. Press the down arrow to go to the start
of the previous track. Pressing either arrow for more
than two seconds will search the previous or next
tracks at two tracks per second. When the track number
that you would like to play appears on the display,
release the arrow to stop searching and to play
the track.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN and the track number
appear on the display and you hear a beep. The CD will
go to the next track, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default on
the display, track and elapsed time, push the button
until you see the display you want, then hold the button
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default. While elapsed time appears on the
display, CD TIME will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a.pls, or.m3u, or.rmp
extension, other file extensions may not work.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names may
use more disc memory space than necessary. To
conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of the
file, folder or playlist names. You can also play an
MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders. The
system can support up to 11 folders in depth, though,
keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order
to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
3-61
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks will be played in the following order:
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files will
be located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions will have no function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the
name of the folder the radio will display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
3-62
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play will
begin from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have been
played, play will continue from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, play will begin again at the first track of
the first folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See RCL later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such as
.mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 39 characters or 3 pages will
be shortened. The display will not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING DISC will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing and the
CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the eject
button or the RCL button.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-78 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-63
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
To repeat the tracks on the CD, press and hold this
pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep and
DISC RANDOM will appear on the display. This
feature will not work with playlists.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
\ 1 (Forward):
Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
at 10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 20 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the track. FWD and the elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
RDM 2 (Random): To repeat the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FOLDER RANDOM will appear on the display. Once all
of the tracks in the current folder or playlist have
been played, the system will move on to the next folder
or playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
3-64
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RANDOM will appear on the display.
# 3 (Next Folder):
Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the next folder or playlist. If the disc
contains playlists, it will go through the playlist, then
the folders. Pressing this button while in folder random
mode will take you to the next folder and random
the tracks in that folder. This function will not work on a
CD that does not contain folders or playlists.
4 s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the track. REV and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display. If this pushbutton is pressed
for more than 20 seconds, the radio will stop reversing
and begin to play.
6 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the previous folder or playlist. If the disc
contains playlists, it will go through the playlist, then the
folders. Pressing this pushbutton while in folder random
mode will take you to the previous folder and random the
tracks in that folder. This function will not work on a CD
that does not contain folders or playlists.
Track mode will display the current track number and
the ID3 tag song name.
w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to the start of the
next track. Press the down arrow to go to the start of the
previous track. Pressing either arrow for more than
two seconds will search the previous or next tracks at
two tracks per second. When the track number that you
would like to play appears on the display, release the
arrow to stop searching and to play the track.
To change the default on the display, push this button
until you see the display you want, then hold this button
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
the selected display will now be the default.
TUNE: Turn this knob to fast track reverse or advance
through tracks in all folders or playlists. The track
number and file name will appear on the display for
each track. Turn this knob while in random to fast track
reverse or advance the tracks in sequential order.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to switch between track
mode, folder or playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display will show only 13 characters, but there can
be up to three pages of text. If there are more than
13 characters in the song, folder, or playlist name
pushing this button within two seconds will take you to
the next page of text. If there are no other pages to
be shown, pushing this button within two seconds will
take you to the next display mode.
Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
Time of day mode will display the time of day and the
ID3 tag song name.
INFO (Information): INFO will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-65
CD Messages
Radio with Six-Disc CD
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-66
If your vehicle has the Monsoon audio system, included
are seven speakers. The radio will display MONSOON
when the radio or the ignition is turned on. See your GM
dealer for details.
The radio has a blinking red light that is used as a
theft-deterrent feature. The light will blink whenever the
ignition is off.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to display the current
radio station frequency. When the ignition is off,
press this button to display the time.
To change the default on the display, press the RCL
button until you see the display you want, then hold the
button until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display and you will hear a double
beep. The radio will go to a preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-67
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob
to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
3-68
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQ
button until CUSTOM appears on the display. Then
manually adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using the
AUDIO knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold the
AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and adjust
the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform
the following:
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of
day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select and to take you to the
PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once.
If the PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK
arrow twice to display the PTY and then to go to
another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE button to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will
search for stations with the selected PTY and
traffic announcements.
3-69
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. Select
multiple interrupts if desired. When listening to a CD,
the last selected RDS station will interrupt play if
that selected program type format is broadcast.
s SCAN t:
Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
Alternate Frequency: Alternate frequency allows the
radio to switch to a stronger station with the same
program type. To turn alternate frequency on, press and
hold AM/FM for two seconds. AF ON will appear on
the display. The radio may switch to stations with
a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold AM/FM
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Setting Preset PTYs
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press AM/FM to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-70
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message
until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. If no
station is found that broadcast traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
The radio will play the traffic announcements if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
3-71
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-78 for
more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the CD player. This CD player will
hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
3-72
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green
you can load another CD. The CD player takes up to
six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, the
radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear under
the CD number that is playing and the track number will
appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of this
button to eject a CD(s). To eject the CD that is
currently playing, press and release this button. To
eject multiple CDs, press and hold this button for
two seconds. You will hear a beep and the indicator
light will flash to let you know when a CD is
being ejected.
REMOVE CD will appear on the display. The CD can
be removed. If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds,
the CD will be automatically pulled back into the
player. If the CD is pushed back into the player, before
the 25 second time period is complete, the player
will sense an error and will try to eject the CD several
times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after trying to push it in manually. The player’s
25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,
causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove
the CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off
and then on again, or wait for the system to reset.
This will clear the CD-sensing feature and enable CDs
to be loaded into the player again.
3-73
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on
one CD or on all of the CDs.
3-74
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
sSEEK t:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default on
the display, track and elapsed time, press the button
until you see the display you want, then hold the button
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If
S-LIST is on the display, press the SONG LIST
button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save
the track into memory. When SONG LIST is
pressed, one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will be heard to confirm the
track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
3-75
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return to
the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will be heard to confirm the
track has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
3-76
To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
CD Messages
Radio Reception
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
GM dealer when reporting the problem.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
3-77
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Care of the CD Player
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM™
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
3-78
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the roof of the
vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-9
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
StabiliTrak® System ......................................4-10
Panic Brake Assist ........................................4-11
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .......................4-12
Steering ......................................................4-12
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-14
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-15
Driving at Night ............................................4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-18
City Driving ..................................................4-20
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24
Winter Driving ..............................................4-26
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-30
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-31
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-31
Towing ..........................................................4-37
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-37
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-37
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-40
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-9.
4-2
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
4-4
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-32.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking
system that will help prevent a braking skid.
United States
Canada
If your vehicle has ABS, this warning light on the
instrument panel will come on briefly when you start
your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on,
and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves
or pulses a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, the anti-lock brake
system warning light will stay on. See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-33.
4-7
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
If your vehicle has the vehicle stability control system, it
includes a brake assist system which provides more
powerful braking during a sudden, hard brake
application. See “Vehicle Stability Control System”
under Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply your
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though
you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or feel
the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This will help
you retain steering control. If you do have ABS, it is
different. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-7.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Braking in Emergencies
Traction Control System (TCS)
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. However, if you do not have ABS, your first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels can
stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond
to your steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever
direction it was headed when the wheels stopped rolling.
That could be off the road, into the very thing you
were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
4-9
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. Leave the system on during ordinary driving so
that it can operate when needed. When the ignition
is turned to ON, the system automatically turns on.
This light should come on
briefly when you start the
engine. If it stays on or
comes on while you
are driving, there is a
problem with your traction
control system.
The TRAC OFF button is
located to the left of the
steering wheel below
the instrument panel
cluster.
4-10
When getting the vehicle out of mud or newly fallen
snow, turn off the traction control system. The system
that controls engine performance interferes with the
process of freeing the front wheels. To turn off traction
control, press the TRAC OFF button. The traction
control system warning light will come on. The vehicle
stability control system (StabiliTrak®) is always activated,
even when the traction control system is turned off.
To turn the traction control system back on, press the
TRAC OFF button again. The traction control system
warning light will go off. See Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light on page 3-34 for more information.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may have this feature. The StabiliTrak®
system helps provide integrated control of the systems
such as anti-lock brake system, traction control and
engine control. This system automatically controls the
brakes and engine to help prevent the vehicle from
skidding when cornering on a slippery road surface or
turning the steering wheel abruptly.
This system will activate when your vehicle speed
reaches or exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h), and will
deactivate when the vehicle speed reduces to below
9 mph (15 km/h).
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for
a few seconds when the engine is started or just
after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the
system is in the self-check mode, but does not indicate a
malfunction.
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the traction
control system warning light will blink and an alarm
will sound intermittently. Adjust your driving accordingly.
This light warns that there
is a problem somewhere in
the traction control
system or StabiliTrak®.
Panic Brake Assist
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver to
maintain brake application. When this happens the brake
pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let the system work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise but this
is normal. The brakes will return to normal operation after
the brake pedal has been released.
The brake assist system becomes operational after the
vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops operating when
the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately
3 mph (5 km/h).
4-11
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to
slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive
the vehicle as required. There may be a slight
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
4-12
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you
have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you
have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard
braking can demand too much of those places. You
can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock your wheels.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-14
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your passenger side outside mirror is convex. The
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away
from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
4-15
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-16
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the
wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure
on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This
restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down
steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the
wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much
road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-18
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-52.
4-19
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-21
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
4-22
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-24
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-25
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-52.
4-26
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
you will want to brake very gently, too. If you do
have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-7. This system improves your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Whether you have ABS or not, you will want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
Without ABS, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let
up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down
steadily to get the most traction you can.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-27
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so hard
that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-28
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-29
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
4-30
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-31.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-68.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If
that does not get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery
hook. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-37.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-31
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C), and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-52
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open you will find the label attached
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. This weight
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
4-32
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Item
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-40 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules and trailering tips.
B
Example 1
A
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-33
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle
capacity weight.
4-34
Certification Label
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the
center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. It tells you the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-35
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
•
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly. If you
have fold-down rear seats, you will find
four anchors on the back wall of your trunk.
You can use these anchors to tie down
lighter loads. They are not strong enough
for heavy things, however, so put them
as far forward as you can in the trunk or
rear area.
4-36
CAUTION:
•
•
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-22.
4-37
Dinghy Towing
If your vehicle is a front-wheel-drive with a manual
transaxle, it can be dinghy towed.
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your vehicle
could be badly damaged and the repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
When dinghy towing, be sure to follow the posted legal
speed limit.
1. Put the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
2. Turn the ignition to ACC to avoid locking the steering
wheel. Make sure the audio system is turned off and
that nothing is plugged into the power outlets.
3. Release the parking brake.
After dinghy towing, let the engine idle for more than
three minutes before driving the vehicle.
4-38
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Dolly Towing
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for an automatic
transaxle and in NEUTRAL for a manual transaxle.
3. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
4. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
If your vehicle is a front-wheel drive vehicle it can be
towed using a dolly. To tow your vehicle using a dolly,
follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
4-39
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the
vehicle trailering capacity of your vehicle, you should
4-40
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your
engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
4-41
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31 for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-42
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label located in the glovebox.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31. Then be
sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• Don’t let the steel in a hitch contact the aluminum
on your bumper. If you do, the two will corrode.
You can use something like paint or plastic tape to
separate the steel and aluminum. The same
steel to aluminum problem can happen with
fasteners too.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes?
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly. And, if you have anti-lock brakes, do not
try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
both systems won’t work well, or at all.
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 2-28. Dirt and water can too.
4-43
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch, platform and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-44
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transaxle overheating.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or into gear for
a manual transaxle, yet. When parking uphill, turn
your wheels away from the curb. When parking
downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake and shift into PARK (P) for an automatic
transaxle or REVERSE (R) for a manual transaxle.
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-45
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
4-46
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-21
Manual Transaxle Fluid ..................................5-24
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-25
Engine Coolant .............................................5-26
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-28
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-36
Brakes ........................................................5-37
Battery ........................................................5-40
Jump Starting ...............................................5-41
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-45
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-46
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps ..........................................5-46
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-48
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-49
Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-50
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-51
Tires ..............................................................5-52
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-55
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-58
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-60
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-62
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-64
Buying New Tires .........................................5-64
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-65
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-66
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-67
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-67
Tire Chains ..................................................5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-69
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-70
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-71
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ..........................................5-73
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-78
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-81
Appearance Care ............................................5-81
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-81
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-82
Leather .......................................................5-83
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-84
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-84
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-84
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-85
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-85
Finish Care ..................................................5-85
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .........5-86
5-2
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-86
Tires ...........................................................5-87
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-87
Finish Damage .............................................5-87
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-87
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-87
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-88
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-89
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-89
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-89
Electrical System ............................................5-90
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-90
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-90
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-90
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-91
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-91
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-92
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-94
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-96
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........5-98
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-14.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-21.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-89.
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 1.8L engine (VIN Code 8), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of
87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, you
may notice an audible knocking noise when you drive,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
If your vehicle has the 1.8L H.O. DOHC engine
(VIN Code L), use premium unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 91 or higher. In an emergency,
you can use regular unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane fuel is used,
do not perform any aggressive driving maneuvers
such as wide open throttle applications. You may also
hear audible spark knock during acceleration. Refill your
tank with premium fuel as soon as possible to avoid
damaging your engine. If you are using gasoline rated at
91 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,
your engine needs service.
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6
for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-35. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
5-6
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
5-8
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The fuel door release lever
is located near the floor
under the driver’s seat on
the outboard side.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
On some vehicles you may have to push in while
turning the cap.
While refueling, hang the fuel cap inside of the
fuel door.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-85.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-35.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-35.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the release
handle with this symbol
on it. It is located
below the instrument
panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release. The lever is located
near the middle of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
4. Release the hood prop rod from its retainer and put
it into the slot in the hood. To insert the hood prop
rod into the slot, move it straight up. If it is
moved to the side or toward the inside of the
vehicle, it may become detached.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Make sure to return the hood prop rod
carefully back to its retainer to avoid damaging
the vehicle.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood of the 1.8L L4 (VIN Code 8) engine, you will see the following:
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-36.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-35.
C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-28.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-30.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 5-21.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir and Hydraulic
Clutch (If Equipped). See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes
on page 5-37 and Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-25.
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
J. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-94.
5-13
When you open the hood of the 1.8L L4 (VIN Code L) engine, you will see the following:
5-14
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-36.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-35.
C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-28.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-30.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 5-21.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir and Hydraulic
Clutch (If Equipped). See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes
on page 5-37 and Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-25.
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
J. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-94.
5-15
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
If the engine oil pressure
light appears on the
instrument cluster, it
means you need to check
your engine oil level
right away.
For more information, see Oil Pressure Light on
page 3-38.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
5-16
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
1.8L L4 (VIN Code 8) Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
1.8L L4 (VIN Code L) Engine
If the oil is below the indent at the tip of the dipstick,
you will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil. But you
must use the right kind. This section explains what
kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-96.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
hole, your engine could be damaged.
5-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-18
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is recommend
that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an
SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and
better protection for your engine at extremely low
temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
Change the oil and filter every 5,000 miles (8 000 km) or
3 months, whichever occurs first. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-5.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do
the following:
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the air
cleaner/filter at each engine oil change. Replace the
filter every 30,000 miles (48 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4 for more information.
5-20
1. Release the two clips that hold the cover down.
2. Lift the cover off.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Check the fluid in the transaxle and differential at the
intervals listed in Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services on page 6-4, and be sure to use the transaxle
fluid listed in Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-19.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-21
How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 158°F to 176°F
(70°C to 80°C).
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid
could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust
system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
5-22
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid
The automatic transaxle dipstick has an orange
handle and is located near the front of the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19.
1. Release the tab and pull out the dipstick and wipe it
with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the area between dimples on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be between the
two dimples in the hot range.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then press the tab
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then press the tab
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-23
Manual Transaxle Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have your manual transaxle fluid
level checked is when the engine oil is changed.
However, the fluid in your manual transaxle does not
require changing.
Then, follow these steps:
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
How to Check
How to Add Fluid
Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose
to have this done at your Pontiac dealership service
department.
Here is how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-19.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid
could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust
system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transaxle
is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transaxle case.
5-24
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully
seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check the fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
will not correct a leak.
The hydraulic clutch and brake master cylinder use the
same reservoir.
When to Check and What to Use
The reservoir is located at
the back of the engine
compartment, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your master
cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See Part B:
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-13 and
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-19.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Check to make sure that the fluid level is at or above
the MIN mark. If the level is below the MIN mark,
see the instructions on the reservoir cap.
5-25
Engine Coolant
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a coolant developed
to last for five years or 100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first. When coolant is added or
changed, use DEX-COOL® coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-26
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19 for more
information.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at LOW, or a
little higher. When your engine is warm, the level
should be up to FULL, or a little higher.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the coolant recovery tank.
Adding Coolant
®
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-30.
5-27
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-35.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-28
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If
the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-29
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL mark.
If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap
or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere else in the cooling system.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
5-30
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If
the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If
it is not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at or above the FULL mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-26 for more information about the
proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper coolant.
5-31
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL mark, start your vehicle.
5-32
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper coolant mixture, up
to the base of the filler neck. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-26 for more information about the proper
coolant mixture.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
5-33
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler
neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of
the proper coolant mixture through the filler neck until
the level reaches the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the ears on the pressure cap are in line with the
vent tube.
5-34
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
You can check your fluid without taking the cap off. Just
look at the reservoir.
• When the engine compartment is hot, the level
should be between the HOT marks.
• When the engine compartment is cool, the level
should be between the COLD marks.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Notice: When adding power steering fluid or
making a complete fluid change, always use the
proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can
cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
What to Use
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
If your vehicle has the low windshield washer fluid level
warning light, it will come on when the fluid level is
too low. See Low Washer Fluid Warning Light on
page 3-40.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-36
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The hydraulic clutch and
brake master cylinder use
the same reservoir. It is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location
of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system or the
hydraulic clutch system. If it is, have that system fixed
immediately, since a leak means that your brakes
will not work well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
and/or clutch hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-32.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-19.
5-37
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Brake Wear
The GT series has four-wheel disc brakes. All other
models have front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-85.
5-38
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When you have the front brake pads
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-18.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then — very carefully — make a
few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
5-39
Battery
Vehicle Storage
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s
label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
5-40
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-41 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want
to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps
to do it safely.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-41
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are
not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-42
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-43
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
5-44
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-17.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19.
Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear
Drive Module)
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it
repaired, if needed.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19.
5-45
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-51.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5-46
A. Headlamp
B. Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
To replace the headlamp, turn signal, or parking lamp
bulb, do the following:
1. Open the hood and locate the lamp assembly.
2. Remove the rubber cover and socket from
the headlamp or turn signal/parking lamp.
3. Release the retainer clip holding the bulb on the
headlamp by pressing down and moving the
metal retainer away from you.
Turn the turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove.
4. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
5. Reverse the steps to install a new bulb.
5-47
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
To replace the center high-mounted stoplamp bulb, do
the following:
1. Locate the bulb which is on the inside of the
liftgate/liftglass near the top.
2. Remove the two clips on both sides of the cover
and remove it.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
out of the lamp housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.
3. Remove the two screws from the CHMSL housing.
Then remove the housing to expose the bulb.
5-48
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
To replace the turn signal and/or stop/taillamp bulbs, do
the following:
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
1. Remove the storage compartment cover in the rear
cargo area of the vehicle to access the bulbs.
5-49
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and
pull it out of the
lamp housing.
Back-Up Lamps
The back-up lamp bulb is
located in the bumper.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the cover.
To replace the back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Reach up under the rear fascia to locate the
back-up lamp housing.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
out of the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.
5-50
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamp
CHMSL
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamp
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Rear Turn Signal
Stoplamp/Taillamp
Bulb Number
7440
921
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove
the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from
the windshield.
1157NA
9003
7440
7443
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” under At Least Twice a Year on page 6-14 for
more information.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-51
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
{CAUTION:
•
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-31.
CAUTION:
5-52
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
danger as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-58.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
car tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(B) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-66.
Passenger Car Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
5-53
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-81 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-81 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-69.
5-54
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and the speed rating of a tire. The
load range represents the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum
speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 70, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
70% as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
5-55
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
5-56
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-64.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
5-57
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-66.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-81.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-59
Tire Pressure Monitor System
If your vehicle has this feature, it is designed to alert
you when the system detects a large change in
the pressure of one tire. The system cannot alert you
before you drive that a tire is low or flat. You must begin
driving before the system will work properly. The
system works with the brake control system and is
designed to detect differences in the tire rotation speeds
that are caused by changes in tire pressure. The tire
pressure monitoring system does not replace normal tire
maintenance, see Tires on page 5-52, Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-62 and When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-64.
This light, on the
instrument panel cluster,
comes on when the
tire pressure monitoring
system detects a low-tire
condition.
This light will also come on for a few seconds and then
go off when you turn the ignition to ON. This indicates
that the tire pressure monitoring system is functioning
properly. If the low-tire pressure warning light comes on
while driving your vehicle, the system may have
5-60
detected a low-tire condition. You need to stop as soon
as possible and check your tires for damage. If a tire
is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-69 and
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70. Also check the
tire pressure in all four tires, and set them to the
specified level shown on the tire and loading label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58 for
additional information.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system on your
vehicle will warn you when one of your tires is
significantly under-inflated and when some combinations
of your tires are significantly under-inflated. However,
there are other combinations of significantly
under-inflated tires for which your tire pressure
monitoring system may not warn you. These other
combinations are relatively common, accounting
for approximately half the instances in which vehicles
have significantly under-inflated tires. For example, your
system may not warn you when both tires on the
same side or on the same axle of your vehicle are
significantly under-inflated. It is particularly important,
therefore, for you to check the tire pressure in all of your
tires regularly and maintain proper pressure.
In order for the tire pressure monitoring system to work
properly you will need to reset (initialize) the tire
pressure monitoring system. Any time you check and/or
adjust a tire’s pressure, repair or replace a tire or
wheel or rotate the tires the tire pressure monitor system
needs to be reset.
Do not reset (initialize) the system without first correcting
the cause of the low-tire condition. If the system is
reset when the tire pressures are incorrect, the system
will not function properly and may not alert you when
a tire is low.
To reset (initialize) the system:
1. Park the vehicle at a safe place and apply the
parking brake. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
3. If the low-tire pressure
warning light is on,
push the SET (reset)
button for a few
seconds. The low-tire
warning light should go
off. The reset button
is on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
4. Press and hold the SET (reset) button until the
low-tire warning light comes on and flashes
on/off three times. The tire pressure warning reset
button starts the reset (initialization) process.
If the low-tire pressure warning light does not flash
when you hold the reset button the system may
be malfunctioning and needs service. See your GM
dealer for service.
The system completes the reset (initialization) process
after driving at vehicle speeds of at least 19 mph
(30 km/h) to 62 mph (100 km/h) for more than one hour.
Do not push the SET (reset) button while driving, if
you do the initialization process will not be performed.
The initialization process can take up to approximately
one hour of driving under the following conditions:
• The vehicle speed is between 31 mph (50 km/h) and
62 mph (100 km/h).
• The roads are dry, smooth and straight.
• The number of passengers is one or two (including
the driver).
5-61
The low-tire pressure warning light may not come on
even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come
on when the tire inflation pressure is set correctly
under the following circumstances:
• A compact spare tire, snow tires, or tire chains are
installed on your vehicle.
• The tires are over-inflated, or the tire inflation
pressure suddenly drops due to a tire bursting
or other causes.
• The vehicle is driven on a slippery road surface
such as rough or frozen roads.
• The vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h),
and the driving duration is less than five minutes.
• The tires are made by a different manufacturer or
differ in tread pattern than the original
equipment tires.
• Rapid acceleration/deceleration or multiple
consecutive sharp turns.
• Towing a trailer.
• The vehicle is loaded over the limit or not
balanced properly.
• The initialization (reset) procedure was not
performed correctly after replacing or rotating tires
or wheels.
• The outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C) or
above 104°F (40°C).
5-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-64 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-67 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4 for scheduled
rotation intervals.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Tires should only be moved from front to rear and rear
to front on the same side of the vehicle.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-70.
Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system will need to reset (initialize) the system after
each tire rotation. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 5-60.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures to the amounts shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. Make certain
that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-96.
5-63
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires that are the same size,
brand, load range, speed rating, and construction type
(radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original
tires. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same performance and
vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-53 for additional
information.
{CAUTION:
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-64
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size,
brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It is all
right to drive with your compact spare
temporarily, as it was developed for use on your
vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-81.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31, for more information
about the Tire and Loading Information Label.
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-64 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-65
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
selection width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the Unites States National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear,
traction and temperature performance. (This applies
only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver
or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements.
5-66
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature — A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-67
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be
sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more
information.
5-68
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on
the front tires for front-wheel-drive vehicles. If your
vehicle has all-wheel-drive, install the tire chains on
the front or all four tires but never on the rear tires
only. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION:
5-70
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jack, wheel wrench, jack handle and spare tire
are stowed in the rear of the vehicle, underneath the
floor of the cargo area. To remove the spare tire
and tools do the following:
1. Turn the two lock
knobs on the floor
of the cargo area
to UNLOCK.
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
5-71
2. Lift up the cargo area floor panel, remove the hook
attached to the bottom side of the panel and hook it
over the weatherstripping.
Notice: If you do not put the hook in the proper
location, you could damage your vehicle. Always put
the hook in the proper location in order to avoid
damaging the vehicle.
3. Remove the jack from the tray on the right side of
the compartment and the jack handle and wheel
wrench from the top side of the compartment.
5-72
4. Unscrew the center retaining nut and lift up the
plastic tray to expose the compact spare tire.
5. Unscrew the center bolt from the compact spare tire
and pull out the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-81.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Attach the jack handle to the jack.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the lift head
a little.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), jack
handle (B) and wheel wrench (C).
3. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-73
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
4. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head to fit
over the car flange between the two notches.
5-74
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-75
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
7. Install the spare tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
9. Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
10. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-76
{CAUTION:
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-96 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-96 for the wheel nut torque
specification.
5-77
12. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
The compact spare tire storage area is designed only
for the compact spare tire, the standard tire cannot
be stored there.
To store the flat tire, do the following:
1. Remove the center wheel cap before storing the flat
tire, if your vehicle has aluminum wheels.
2. Place the flat tire on the rear cargo area floor panel
with the outer side of the wheel facing up.
3. Use the tire tie-down straps located under the floor
panel to secure the flat tire.
5-78
4. Hook the straps (end closest to the buckle) to the
rear, upper tie-down hooks.
5. Pass the straps through the center hole of
the wheel.
6. Attach the other end of the straps to the rear, lower
tie-down hooks.
5-79
A. Jack
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Bolt
7. Position the tire edge against the rear center end of
the floor panel. Pull the end of the straps to make
sure the tire is secure.
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the
compact spare tire once you are done using it.
5-80
D. Spare Tire
E. Jack Handle
F. Nut
Return the jack (A), jack handle (E), wheel wrench (B)
and compact spare tire to the storage area. When
storing the compact spare tire, put it in place with the
inner side of the wheel facing up.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s
best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in
good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-81
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
5-82
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery
while cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
soils, always try to remove them first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
5-83
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even
make it difficult to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
5-84
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-88.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-88. Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-85.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
5-85
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
5-86
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-87
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
5-88
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It
is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On
this label, you will find the following:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-89
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.
5-90
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and
off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses, circuit breakers and fusible
thermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be
sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the
correct size.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one. Just pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without – like the radio or air conditioner – and use its
fuse, if it is of the value you need. Replace it as soon as
you can.
Before replacing a fuse, turn every electrical switch off.
5-91
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
The fuse block is located underneath the instrument
panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
TAIL
Front Parking Lamps, Taillamps,
License Plate Lamps, Instrument
Panel Lights, Engine Control System
OBD
On-Board Diagnostic System
Empty
Not Used
P/W
Power Windows
WIPER
Windshield Wipers
AM2
Charging System, Air Bag System,
Starter System, Engine Control
STOP
Stop Lamps, CHMSL, Engine
Control System, Anti-lock Brakes,
Cruise Control
DOOR
Power Door Locks, Liftglass Lock
AM1
Cigarette Lighter, Gauge, ECU-IG,
Wiper, Rear Wiper, Washer Fuses
5-92
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Empty
Not Used
ECU-IG
Cruise Control, Anti-lock Brakes,
Theft Deterrent System, Automatic
Transaxle Control System, Electric
Cooling Fan
RR WIPER
Rear Window Wiper, Rear
Window Defogger
A/C
Air Conditioning
INV
Power Outlets
P/POINT
Fuses
Usage
GAUGE
Gauges and Meters, Back-Up
Lamps, Charging System, Power
Door Locks, Power Windows,
Sunroof, Air Conditioning,
Cruise Control
WASHER
Windshield Washers
M-HTR/DEF
1–UP
Engine Control System
HTR
Air Conditioning System
Power Outlets
DEF
Rear Window Defogger,
M-HTR/DEF 1–UP Fuse
ECU-B
Daytime Running Lamps
POWER
Power Windows, Electric Moon Roof
CIG
Cigarette Lighter, Power Rearview
Mirrors, Power Outlets, Audio
System, Automatic Transaxle
Control System
5-93
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
This engine compartment fuse block is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
vehicle near the air cleaner. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on
location.
Fuses
Empty
Not Used
SPARE
Spare Fuse
SPARE
Spare Fuse
SPARE
Spare Fuse
ETCS
5-94
Usage
Electronic Throttle Control System
Fuses
ABS NO. 2
RDI FAN
ABS NO. 1
Usage
Anti-lock Brake System (Without
Stability Control System)
Electric Cooling Fan
Anti-lock Brake System (With
Stability Control System)
FOG
Front Fog Lamps
EFI2
Multiport Fuel Injection
System/Sequential Multiport
Fuel Injection System, Emission
Control System
EFI3
Multiport Fuel Injection
System/Sequential Multiport
Fuel Injection System, Emission
Control System
HEAD MAIN
ALT-S
EFI
HAZARD
HORN
Right Headlamp, Left
Headlamp Fuses
Charging System
Electronic Fuel Injection System
Turn Signal Lamps,
Emergency Flasher
Horn
Fuses
Usage
DOME
Interior Lights, Gauges and Meters,
Audio System, Remote Keyless
Entry System, Navigation System
(If Equipped)
MAIN
Starter System, AM2 Fuse
AMP
Audio System
MAYDAY
OnStar® System
ALT
ABS NO.1, ABS NO.2, RDI FAN,
FOG, Heater, AM1, POWER,
DOOR, ECU-B, TAIL, STOP,
P/POINT, INV, OBD Fuses,
Charging System
HEAD RH
Right-hand Headlamp, Headlamp
High Beam Indicator Lamp
HEAD LH
Left-hand Headlamp
Relays
Usage
M/G
M/G
HEAD
Headlamps
DIMMER
Headlamp Dimmer
HORN
Horn
FAN NO. 2
Cooling Fan System
FAN NO. 1
Cooling Fan System
EFI
Electronic Fuel Injection System
FOG
Fog Lamps
5-95
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
Application
Capacities
English
Metric
1.47 lbs
0.67 kg
1.8L (Code 8)
3.2 qt
3.0 L
1.8L (Code 8) with AWD
3.1 qt
2.9 L
1.8L (Code 8)
6.9 qt
6.5 L
1.8L (Code L)
7.1 qt
6.7 L
1.8L (Code 8)
4.4 qt
4.2 L
1.8L (Code L)
4.7 qt
4.4 L
With AWD
11.9 gal
45.0 L
Without AWD
13.2 gal
50.0 L
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Automatic Transaxle
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
5-96
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Five-Speed
2.0 qt
1.9 L
Six-Speed
2.4 qt
2.3 L
Rear Differential
0.5 qt
0.5 L
Transfer Case
0.8 qt
0.75 L
Wheel Nut Torque
76 lb ft
103 Y
Manual Transaxle
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19.
Engine Specifications
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
1.8L L4
Engine
8
Automatic and Manual
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
1.8L L4 H.O.
L
Automatic and Manual
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
5-97
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Part
GM Part Numbers
Other Part Numbers
Battery
19001602
35–6YR
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
88969107
—
Engine Oil Filter
1.8L (Code 8)
88971573
—
1.8L (Code L)
88969580
—
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
88970273
—
PCV Valve
1.8L (Code 8) Base Model
94859406
—
1.8L (Code 8) AWD Model
94859404
—
1.8L (Code L)
88969512
—
Spark Plugs*
1.8L (Code 8)
94859448
SK16R11†, IFR5A11††
1.8L (Code L)
88969637
SK20R11†, IFR6A11††
*Your engine is fitted with iridium-tipped spark plugs. Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs for better engine
performance.
† DENSO
†† NGK
5-98
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-4
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-5
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-13
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-13
At Least Once a Month .................................6-13
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-14
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-14
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-17
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-17
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-17
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-18
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-18
Throttle System Inspection .............................6-18
Brake System Inspection ................................6-18
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-19
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-21
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the
level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported service
people that will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the required
know-how and the proper tools and equipment
for the job. If you have any doubt, have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how
you will drive it. You may drive short distances only a
few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use
your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you will know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Scheduled Maintenance
5,000 Miles (8 000 km)
The services shown in this schedule up to 120,000 miles
(192 000 km) should be repeated after 120,000 miles
(192 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-13,
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on page 6-17,
and Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-19.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emissions warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services
be performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
10,000 Miles (16 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-18.
6-5
15,000 Miles (24 000 km)
25,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
20,000 Miles (32 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
6-6
30,000 Miles (48 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-20 for more information.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(48 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a
trailer.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
35,000 Miles (56 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
40,000 Miles (64 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
45,000 Miles (72 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
50,000 Miles (80 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
6-7
55,000 Miles (88 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
60,000 Miles (96 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-20 for more information.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every
48 months, whichever occurs first). Visually inspect
belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvious damage.
Replace belt if necessary. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration. Adjust
valve clearance to factory specifications if necessary
(or every 48 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
6-8
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(48 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a
trailer.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every 60,000 miles
(96 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-19 for the proper fluid to use.
65,000 Miles 104 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
70,000 Miles (112 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
75,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 months
since last inspection). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent trailer
towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
80,000 Miles (128 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
85,000 Miles (136 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
6-9
90,000 Miles (144 000 km)
95,000 Miles (152 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-20 for more information.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 months
since last inspection). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(48 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow
a trailer.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
6-10
100,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Drain, flush, and refill the cooling system (or every
5 years, whichever occurs first). This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer perform this
service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-26 for what
to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and neck. Pressure test cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
105,000 Miles (168 000 km)
110,000 Miles (176 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every
48 months, whichever occurs first). Visually inspect
belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvious damage.
Replace belt if necessary. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
115,000 Miles (184 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
6-11
120,000 Miles (192 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-20 for more information.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every
48 months, whichever occurs first). Visually inspect
belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvious damage.
Replace belt if necessary. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration.
Adjust valve clearance to factory specifications
if necessary (or every 48 months, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
6-12
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(48 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a
trailer.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every 60,000 miles
(96 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-19 for the proper fluid to use.
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36
for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
Hood Latch Operation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Pull the primary hood latch release handle inside the
vehicle. The secondary latch should keep the hood from
opening all the way when the primary latch is released.
Make sure the hood closes firmly. See Hood Release
on page 5-11 for further details.
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
At Least Once a Month
Engine Oil Level Check
Tire Inflation Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further
details.
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-52 for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-26 for further details.
6-13
At Least Twice a Year
Fluid Level Check
Restraint System Check
Check the power steering pump, rear axle, transfer
case, and automatic or manual transaxle fluid levels and
add as needed. See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-35
and Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-21 or
Manual Transaxle Fluid on page 5-24. Check for leaks.
A fluid loss in these systems could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired at once.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see Windshield,
Backglass, and Wiper Blades on page 5-86.
Seat Operation Check
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Body Lubrication Service
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-19.
Lubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body door
hinges, rear compartment, and any folding seat
hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment.
6-14
Make sure the head restraints stay in position and all
seat latches lock. Check that the recliner holds by
pushing and pulling the seatback while it is reclined.
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-24.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway, and
try to start the engine. The vehicle should start
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch
is not pushed all the way down, your vehicle
needs service.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-24.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-15
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transaxle, the ignition should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• With a manual transaxle, the ignition should turn to
LOCK only if you push the key in farther, while
turning it toward LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
6-16
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the
drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage.
Replace seals if necessary.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-28.
6-17
Fuel System Inspection
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
6-18
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for your
vehicle. To determine the proper
viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,
see Engine Oil on page 5-16.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-26.
Hydraulic
Brake/Clutch
System
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Power Steering
System
DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Manual
Transaxle
GM Goodwrench® Synthetic
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346190,
in Canada 10953477 — 1 quart) or
SAE 75W-90 GL-5 gear oil.
Automatic
Transaxle
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,
in Canada 22689186).
See Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-21.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Manual
Transaxle
Shift Linkage
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
6-19
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Clutch Linkage
Pivot Points
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Floor Shift
Linkage
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Rear Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345977,
in Canada 10953482) or SAE
80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant.
6-20
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345977,
in Canada 10953482) or SAE
80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and Release
Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-21
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-22
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-23
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-24
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................7-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-14
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-14
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is free of charge and
your case will generally be heard within 40 days.
If you do not agree with the decision given in your case,
you may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Pontiac, refer to the addresses below.
United States — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Contact Pontiac’s
Roadside Assistance toll-free at 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743). Roadside Assistance Representatives are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
7-6
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
•
•
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743), text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.
Courtesy Transportation
Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Pontiac reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses
may be available, for up to a maximum of five days.
In addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available, up to a five-day maximum.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-8
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your
vehicle may record information about safety belt usage.
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,
and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. Unlike the
data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
7-10
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine
GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts.
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-11
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states with “no
fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Reporting Safety Defects
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-14
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-15
✍ NOTES
7-16
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-16
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-64
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-90
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-18
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-29
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-28
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-49
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-64
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-57
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-59
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-64
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-57
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-58
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-55
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-52
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-45
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-12
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-78
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..... 3-78
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-33
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-86
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-84
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-87
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-85
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-81
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-82
Finish Care ................................................. 5-85
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-87
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................. 5-84
Leather ...................................................... 5-83
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-87
Tires .......................................................... 5-87
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-87
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-88
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-85
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-84
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-86
Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 3-18
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-42
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-78
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-78
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-78
Radio with CD .................................... 3-43, 3-54
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-66
3-43
3-77
3-78
3-14
5-21
2-18
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-40
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-9
Panic Assist ................................................ 4-11
Parking ...................................................... 2-24
System Inspection ....................................... 6-18
System Warning Light .................................. 3-32
Brakes .......................................................... 5-37
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-14
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-46
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-50
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-48
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-46
2
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps .........................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............
Buying New Tires ...........................................
5-46
5-51
5-49
5-64
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-96
Carbon Monoxide ..................... 2-9, 2-28, 4-26, 4-40
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-84
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-78
Your CDs ................................................... 3-78
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-36
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-37
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-34
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-48
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-68
Charging System Light .................................... 3-31
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-35
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-87
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..........
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ..................................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces .................................................
Leather ......................................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .......
Climate Control System ...................................
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
1-31
1-28
1-37
1-26
1-42
1-45
1-36
3-18
5-86
5-85
5-82
5-85
5-81
5-84
5-83
5-87
5-87
5-85
5-84
5-86
3-18
3-22
3-21
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-25
Coinholder(s) .................................................. 2-34
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-10
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-81
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-12
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-17
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-39
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-34
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-13
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-14
3
D
E
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Door
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-40
Locks .......................................................... 2-6
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-7
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-17
City ........................................................... 4-20
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-18
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-31
Winter ........................................................ 4-26
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-90
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-94
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-91
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-90
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-92
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-91
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-90
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20
Battery ....................................................... 5-40
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-35
Coolant ...................................................... 5-26
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-17
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-35
Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-18
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-28
Oil ............................................................. 5-16
Overheating ................................................ 5-28
Starting ...................................................... 2-16
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-16
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-25
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
4
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-87
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-78
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-69
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-70
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-78
Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-34
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-21
Manual Transaxle ........................................ 5-24
Power Steering ........................................... 5-35
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Folding Seatback, Passenger ............................. 1-6
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Fuel (cont.)
Gage ......................................................... 3-41
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-41
System Inspection ....................................... 6-18
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-94
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-91
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-92
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-90
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-35
Fuel .......................................................... 3-41
Speedometer .............................................. 3-26
Tachometer ................................................. 3-27
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-34
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
5
H
I
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-90
Headlamps
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-14
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-46
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-46
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Heater ........................................................... 3-18
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-40
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-25
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-15
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-28
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-58
Inspection
Brake System ............................................. 6-18
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-18
Exhaust System .......................................... 6-17
Fuel System ............................................... 6-18
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-17
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-17
Throttle System ........................................... 6-18
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Storage Area .............................................. 2-34
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-15
Cluster ....................................................... 3-25
Interior Lamps Control ..................................... 3-15
6
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-41
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-53
Lamps
Exterior ...................................................... 3-13
Fog ........................................................... 3-15
Interior Control ............................................ 3-15
Reading ..................................................... 3-16
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-37
Liftgate/Liftglass ................................................ 2-9
Liftglass/Liftgate ................................................ 2-9
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-28
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-33
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-32
Charging System ......................................... 3-31
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-39
Door Ajar ................................................... 3-40
Light (cont.)
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-40
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 3-39
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-41
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ................... 3-33
Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-40
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-35
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-38
Overdrive Off .............................................. 3-40
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-29
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-27
StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 3-34
Taillamp Indicator ......................................... 3-39
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-34
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-34
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-16
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-31
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-6
Power Door .................................................. 2-7
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-41
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-40
7
M
Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ............ 5-98
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-13
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-13
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-14
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-14
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-18
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-18
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-17
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-18
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-13
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-17
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . 6-19
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-21
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-5
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-17
8
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-18
Using .......................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-35
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual Transaxle
Fluid .......................................................... 5-24
Operation ................................................... 2-21
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-11
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-30
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-30
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-31
Outside Remote Control Mirrors ..................... 2-31
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-14
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 5-98
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-26
Odometers, Trip .............................................. 3-26
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-14
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-38
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-26
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-32
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-31
Remote Controls Mirrors ............................... 2-31
Overdrive Off ................................................. 2-21
Overdrive Off Light .......................................... 3-40
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Panic Brake Assist .......................................... 4-11
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-25
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-26
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-24
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-28
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-27
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-13
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-17
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-19
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-21
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-29
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-22
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-59
Passing ......................................................... 4-14
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-16
Door Locks .................................................. 2-7
Electrical System ......................................... 5-91
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ................. 3-17
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-35
Windows .................................................... 2-11
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-25
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-13
9
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-28
Radios .......................................................... 3-42
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-78
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-78
Radio with CD .................................... 3-43, 3-54
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-66
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-43
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-77
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-16
Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ................. 2-36
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-8
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-22
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-35
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-10
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-30
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-30
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-3
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-37
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-73
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-71
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-51
10
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-14
United States Government ............................ 7-13
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-66
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-67
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-22
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-31
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-29
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners ..............................................
Reminder Light ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Driver Position ............................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .....
Rear Seat Passengers .................................
Right Front Passenger Position ......................
1-25
3-27
5-84
1-14
1-14
1-13
1-22
1-22
Safety Belts (cont.)
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-22
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-9
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-21
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-5
Seatback, Folding Passenger ............................. 1-6
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Passenger Folding Seatback ........................... 1-6
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-3
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-42
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-45
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-35
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-14
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-64
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-43
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-87
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-25
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-26
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-21
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-81
Installing .................................................... 5-73
Removing ................................................... 5-71
Storing ....................................................... 5-78
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-96
Speedometer .................................................. 3-26
StabiliTrak® System ......................................... 4-10
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ................................ 3-34
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-16
Steering ........................................................ 4-12
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot
and Seal Inspection ..................................... 6-17
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-34
Coinholder(s) .............................................. 2-34
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-34
Glove Box .................................................. 2-34
Instrument Panel Storage Area ...................... 2-34
Rear Cargo Accessory Track System .............. 2-36
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-35
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-12
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-37
11
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-27
Taillamp Indicator Light .................................... 3-39
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-49
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-34
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-12
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-12
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tires ............................................................. 5-52
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-86
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-64
Chains ....................................................... 5-68
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-70
Cleaning .................................................... 5-87
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-81
Different Size .............................................. 5-65
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-69
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-58
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-62
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-73
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-60
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-73
12
Tires (cont.)
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-71
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-78
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-53
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-55
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-66
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-67
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-67
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-64
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-37
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-40
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-37
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-34
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 4-10
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-24
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-18
Transaxle Operation, Manual ............................ 2-21
Trip Odometers .............................................. 3-26
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
W
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-77
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-66
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-24
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-40
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-67
Different Size .............................................. 5-65
Replacement ............................................... 5-67
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-36
Windows ....................................................... 2-10
Manual ...................................................... 2-11
Power ........................................................ 2-11
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-31
Parking Your ............................................... 2-27
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-89
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-89
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-21
Visors ........................................................... 2-12
13
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .......... 5-86
Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-36
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-51
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-90
Wipers ......................................................... 3-8
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-10
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26
14
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-78
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement